2014 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

2014 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual
2014 Grand Cherokee
Chrysler Group LLC
14WK741-126-AD
Fifth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Grand Cherokee
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to
or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
1
4 INTRODUCTION
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
wherever you drive.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisThe two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
four-wheel drive vehicle.
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s read these publications carefully. Following the instrucManual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, tions and recommendations in this manual will help
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis- assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
injury. Drive carefully.
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Rollover Warning Label
1
6 INTRODUCTION
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save
this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identifiThis Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against opcation number and optional equipment.
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right front
seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN.
This number also appears on the Automobile Information
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . .
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .16
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . .
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .19
. . . . . . . . . . . .20
. . . . . . . . . . . .23
. . . . . . . . . . . .23
. . . . . . . . . . . .23
. . . . . . . . . . . .24
. . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .25
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .29
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .29 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . .53
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .56
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .57
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .58
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .73
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .60
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .106
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Seat Belt Lock Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Supplemental Restraint System
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
(SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .69
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion).
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
Emergency Key Removal
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
SENTRY KEY®
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
Replacement Keys
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveCustomer Key Programming
niently from outside the vehicle while still
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
maintaining security. The system has a range of
performed at an authorized dealer.
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
General Information
NOTE:
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
subject to the following conditions:
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans• This device may not cause harmful interference.
mitter may reduce this range.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
NOTE:
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
to the ON/RUN position.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opPress and release the REMOTE START button
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
on the RKE transmitter twice within five secin the Remote Start mode.
onds. The parking lights will flash, vehicle
doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
will run for 15 minutes.
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will
display in the EVIC until you press the start button. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
further information.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START When remote start is activated, the heated steering
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
Start request.
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect® system. For more
cycle, press and release the START/STOP button.
information on Remote Start Comfort System operation
refer to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Rearming The System
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When
the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door
locks, and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals, the
horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
for an additional 15 minutes.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different.
Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the To Disarm The System
vehicle:
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch the following methods:
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (refer to
⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
further information).
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone Tamper Alert
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
door the alarm will sound.
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furIf the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery ther information.
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit• The front courtesy overhead console and door courter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
NOTE:
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Fob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Flash Lights With Remote Key
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before Headlight Illumination On Approach
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights and turn signals
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitwill flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
lights will turn on.
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
signal.
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
(24 km/h) or greater.
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE:
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors • The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
and horn will remain on.
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Using The Panic Alarm
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
by the system.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You
can dispose of them either in the correct containers as
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
specified by law or by taking them to a Dealership,
performed at an authorized dealer.
which will deal with their disposal.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
housing or the printed circuit board.
battery.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
NOTE:
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
other hand.
Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please
Programming Additional Transmitters
dispose of them according to respect for environment
and local laws.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
by the party responsible for compliance could void the upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
Manual Door Lock Knob
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in
the vehicle and the driver’s door is open, the doors will
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
not lock.
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Power Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
Power Door Lock Switch
1. Open the rear door.
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
the vehicle before closing the door.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the NOTE:
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
“Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument
down the window, and open the door using the outside
Panel” for further information.
door handle.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the theft alarm.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower repress the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
sponse time.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outTransmitter In Vehicle
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF. To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate release for a power open on vehicles
equipped with Power Liftgate. Press the electronic liftgate release and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will To Lock The Liftgate
open with the electronic liftgate release and no RKE
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
Transmitter is required.
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the
electronic liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect®, the liftgate will
unlock when you press the electronic liftgate release. For
further information, refer to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: The key must be within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle
being used to lock the vehicle.
2
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
Power Window Switches
The power window controls are located on the driver’s The power window switches remain active for up to ten
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
passenger door and rear doors which operate the front Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
passenger and rear passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING!
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
2
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
Auto Down Window Switches
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To stop the window from going all the way up during the NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condithe first detent and release when you want the window to
tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
stop.
during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Auto Up Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
2
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows Wind Buffeting
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls, ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
press the Window Lockout button again.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the electronic
liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
programmed in Uconnect®, the liftgate will unlock when
you press the electronic liftgate release. For further
information, refer to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only
lock the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built into
the electronic liftgate release.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
The power liftgate may be opened by pressing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ located in Things To Know Before Starting) or by pressing the LIFTGATE
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice
within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the
liftgate is open, pressing the button twice within five
seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftoverhead console, or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE
gate trim panel.
button located on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
opening. Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
rear trim panel once will close the liftgate only, this
power liftgate functionality.
button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® settings)
and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further information, refer to ⬙Uconnect®⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your
Instrument Panel⬙.
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures • If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
liftgate switches.
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
meets sufficient resistance.
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
detection of an obstruction.
liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
open, press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully
open the liftgate, and then press it again to close.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and second
row center) include Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position
by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat
or secure a large item in a seat — if equipped
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
Please pay close attention to the information in this
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
buckled up in a rear seat.
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
between you and the door.
their arm.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
(Continued)
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Latch Plate
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retracThe belt will automatically retract to its stowed positor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack From Belt
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
2
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
button, verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by
pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it
is locked into position.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
Driver
Center
Passenger
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
Second
Row
ALR
ALR
ALR
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on • N/A — Not Applicable
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into posi• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
tion.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortfeature for each seating position.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
the occupant’s chest.
These head restraints are passive, deployable compoSeat Belt Pretensioners
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
The seat belts for both front seating positions are identified by any markings, only through visual inspecequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
These devices may improve the performance of the seat trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
Energy Management Feature
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
2
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may 1 — Head Restraint Front Half
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
a comfortable position.
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they 3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
into the back decorative plastic half.
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
NOTE:
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
AHR In Reset Position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belt Lock Out
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that
will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho- across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
deactivating BeltAlert®.
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a Knee Bolster
below the glove compartment.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC Air Bag System Components
air bags are located above the side windows and their Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
covers are labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
system components:
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The • Air Bag Warning Light
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
• Steering Wheel and Column
the outboard side of the front seats.
• Instrument Panel
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the • Knee Impact Bolsters
steering column and a Knee Bolster mounted below the
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
glove compartment.
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
authorized dealer immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
bag only.
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the Supplemental SAB and SABIC air
bags during impacts that require side air bag occupant
protection.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bag.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, SABIC air bags, SAB air
bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as required,
depending on several factors, including the severity and
type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protecThe Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
collisions depending on several factors, including the
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
rollover collisions.
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
required for this vehicle.
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or including some that may produce substantial vehicle
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag may deploy in crashes with little vehicle
front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruThe ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
WARNING!
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
air bag system immediately.
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Inflator Units
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are dewheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
collision.
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
milliseconds.
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate (SABIC) Inflator Units
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very During collisions where the impact is confined to a
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
especially applies to children.
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about onecolumn. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followvehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of ing functions:
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
SABIC air bags, and driver/passenger knee air bags may
until the ignition key is turned off.
deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
Front And Side Impact Sensors
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
removed.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
• Unlock the doors automatically.
events.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
structions for cleaning.
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
bags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
cycled to the ON/RUN.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses.
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Child Restraints
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach
the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position
only.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
2
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat. To access the top tether
strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the
carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor
Panel To Access Top Tether Strap
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Second Row 60/40
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using
the LATCH system. Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating position.
WARNING!
Pulling Down The Carpet
Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuanchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
2
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the car seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
in any direction.
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the following
table(s) and the following sections for more information
about both types of seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
2
ALR / Anchor Locations
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position
only.
Yes
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the car seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the car seat.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
path.
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
“click.”
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
vehicle seat.
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
anchor.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
seat forward to provide better access to the
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert that seating position, move the child restraint to another
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button position in the vehicle if one is available.
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
Transporting Pets
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriinjured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in mental and should be avoided.
a collision.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Defroster
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inopercollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
able.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt Floor Mat Safety Information
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
The light should come on and remain on for
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
Air Bag Warning Light
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .160
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . .
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect®
8.4A/8.4AN — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
. . . . . . .164
. . . . . . .164
. . . . . . .166
. . . . . . .166
. . . . . . .167
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . .167
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .168
▫ Ambient Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .169
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .176
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .180
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .182
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .192
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .193
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .199
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ ACC Operation at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .203 䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .205
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .208
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .212
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . .
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . .
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
. . . .220
. . . .220
. . . .221
. . . .221
. . . .224
. . . .225
. . . .226
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .226
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .217 䡵 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . .
PARK ASSIST
. . . . . . . . . .228
. . . . . . . . . .229
. . . . . . . . . .230
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .234 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .244
▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .234
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .245
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .236
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .248
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .249
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .253
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .254
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .259
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .259
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .261
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .266
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Rear Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .280
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
3
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
Automatic Dimming Mirror
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear The mirror contains an Assist button and a 9–1–1 button
located on the bottom of the mirror.
view viewing.
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Assist Call
9-1-1 Call
The rear view mirror contains an ASSIST push button 1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror;
which automatically connects the vehicle occupants to
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
one of several predefined locations for immediate supthere will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
port:
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a 9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the
tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be con- Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance Phone Screen . Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access via Moconnection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made;
bile features.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
vehicle issues.
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call;
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• the vehicle brand; and
• the last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1
operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING! (Continued)
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red;
• The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”; and,
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The ORC turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the air bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the
ORC system immediately.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact;
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash;
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash;
• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed;
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility;
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator;
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors • Wireless network congestion;
beyond Chrysler Group LLC’s control may prevent or
stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but • Weather; and
are not limited to, the following factors:
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
• The ignition key has been removed from the ignition NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
and the delayed accessories mode is active;
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
• The ignition key is in OFF position;
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal Outside Mirrors
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
properly.
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled,
a potential extra button push is required to get the
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot
three detent positions:
area which can cause excessive drag.
• Full forward position
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, press
the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to
the normal driving position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
3
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addithe visors.
tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on the sun.
automatically.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
Rear Detection Zones
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
3
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Warning Light Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Modes Of Operation
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the Modes Of Operation With Uconnect® System — If
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the Equipped
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programdriver is alerted using both the visual and audible mable Features — Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 Settings ” in “Unalarms, including reducing the radio volume.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Blind Spot Alert
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approis also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
RCP state always requests the chime.
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Blind Spot Alert Off
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
tected object are present on the same side at the same visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In systems.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
muted.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
NOTE:
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM used.
system, the radio is also muted.
SEATS
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
the appropriate visual alert only.
vehicle.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
3
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas- the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control have reached the desired position.
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
when the desired position has been reached.
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
Passenger’s Power Seat
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
the switch will raise and lower the position of the Adjustment
support.
Some models may be equipped with manual front driver
or passenger seats. The seats can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
Power Lumbar Switch
Adjustment Bar
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recline Lever
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be
programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to
“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats With Uconnect® 5.0 — If
Equipped
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect®
system screen.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Press the “Climate” hard-key located on the right side of
the Uconnect® display.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time
to select LO-level heating. Press the soft-key a third time NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
to shut the heating elements OFF.
within two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
3
Front Heated Seats With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN —
If Equipped
There are two heated seat soft-keys that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect®
system screen.
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
Uconnect® display.
within two to five minutes.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
select HI-level heating. Press the soft-key a second time
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
to select LO-level heating. Press the soft-key a third time
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
to shut the heating elements OFF.
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect®
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third 8.4A/8.4AN — If Equipped
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartwithin two to five minutes.
ment and pull air through fine perforations in the seat
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes in higher ambient temperatures.
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, To operate the system, press the “Controls” soft-key
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after located on the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” vented seat soft-key
once to select HI-level ventilation. Press the vented
soft-key a second time to select LO-level ventilation.
Press the vented soft-key a third time to shut off the seat
ventilation.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
3
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
Rear Head Restraint
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
3
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
Rear Seat Release
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Folded
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
3
Rear Seat Release
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of
desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the
same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
Memory Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Programming The Memory Feature
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the 1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn the ignition switch
following:
to the ON/RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences
switch.
(i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic steering
column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
switch.
memory position has been set.
Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display which memory position has been set.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1.
2.
3.
4.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- ProgramPARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
mable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
memory profile.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in• The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory formation.
feature can be enabled through the Uconnect® system To program your RKE transmitters, perform the followscreen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — ing:
Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Enter-N-Go™).
Transmitter To Memory
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release Driver One Memory Position Recall
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
memory switch , press MEMORY button number 1 on
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
the memory switch.
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
transmitter within 10 seconds.
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
memory settings by following steps 1-4 above and pressing the UNLOCK button (instead of LOCK) on the RKE • To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 on
transmitter in Step 4.
the memory switch.
Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a
recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s mirror and
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the steering column stop moving. A delay of one second • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
will occur before another recall can be selected.
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
or Easy Entry.
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
vehicle.
Entry and Easy Exit position.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Pro• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or grammable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ”
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver seat will move information.
about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its To open the hood, two latches must be released.
previously set position when you place the ignition
into the ACC or RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
3
Safety Latch Location
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE:
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
solution followed by rinsing.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. The programmable settings are
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
available in the in the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to
“Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
control through the use of a digital camera mounted on
the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
of view.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automati- NOTE:
cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
• If the windshield or automatic high beam mirror is
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
replaced, the automatic high beam mirror must be
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
authorized dealer.
section for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the dayof vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
time, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in this
and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, etc.) on the
section for further information.
windshield or camera lens will cause the system to
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
function improperly.
The automatic high beam system provides increased
forward lighting at night by automating high beam
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
To Activate
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged.
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward NOTE: If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
To Deactivate
driving.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
further information.
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in Headlight Delay
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
the direction the vehicle is steering.
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
NOTE:
The headlight delay time is programmable in the
• Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on, Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programthe headlights will initialize by performing a brief mable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
sequence of rotations.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when
the vehicle is moving forward.
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
3
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
headlights are required during the day.
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the RKE transmitter the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Interior Lights
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Lights-On Reminder
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when Front Map/Reading Lights
the driver’s door is opened.
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Ambient Light
Multifunction Lever
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- steering column.
ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
3
Multifunction Lever
Ambient Light
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Flash-To-Pass
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steerproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside High/Low Beam Switch
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
defective.
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
Lane Change Assist
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
three times then automatically turn off.
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
Intermittent Wiper Operation
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
NOTE:
If
the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
(16
km/h),
delay
times will be doubled.
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the cycles, then turn off.
intermittent interval previously selected.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Windshield Washer Operation
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
Mist Control
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
shield.
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
for further information.
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
3
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering wheel.
Press the “Heated Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn
the heated steering wheel off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3
Controls Soft-Key
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
Vehicle” for further information.
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or SET
(-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
MPH/KM will appear indicating what speed was set. An
indicator CRUISE will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends on
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display
settings menu, or the RADIO settings menu (dependent
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
on vehicle configuration).
NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends on
selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display To Accelerate For Passing
settings menu, or the RADIO settings menu (dependent Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
on vehicle configuration).
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph moderate hills is normal.
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
the vehicle ahead.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
(Continued)
(Continued)
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the
Adaptive Cruise Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
To Activate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/
OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC displays “ACC
Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The EVIC
will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle •
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
•
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
•
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
•
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
•
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
The shift lever is removed from the Drive position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be- • Driver door is opened at low speeds.
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/
OFF button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than 2 pressing the SET + button.
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the SET + button is continually pressed, the set speed • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
until the button is released. The increase in set speed is
will automatically slow the vehicle.
reflected in the EVIC display.
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
pressing the SET - button.
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
will release the vehicle brakes 2 seconds after coming
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
to a full stop.
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
If the SET - button is continually pressed, the set speed • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downreflected in the EVIC display.
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to mainNOTE:
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
• When you override and push the SET + button or
exceeds normal range (overheated).
SET - buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current
speed of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC.
3
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setting — Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the
the sensor.
button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one
• The distance setting is changed.
bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi- The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; howcator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto- ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of necessary.
the set speed.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
ACC system applies the brakes.
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
When this occurs, you should immediately apply the
brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle ahead.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
Brake Alert
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
ACC Operation at Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within 2 seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will ramp-out. Driver intervention will be
required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within 2
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will rampThe EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
out. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
EVIC is located in the center of the instrument cluster.
The information it displays depends on ACC system
status.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the EVIC:
• Distance Setting Change
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Proximity Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • ACC Unavailable Warning
Control Ready.”
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
five seconds of no ACC display activity
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
EVIC:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Radar Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional informaconditions temporarily limit system performance.
tion refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as Mode” in this section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC /
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
system will deactivate.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is imporThe “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
tant to note the following maintenance items:
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so NOTE:
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
• If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
require a sensor realignment.
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterDoing so could cause an ACC system failure or
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommalfunction.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC / FCW operation.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive “Clean Front Windshield” Warning
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
simply reactivating it.
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC will
display “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC / FCW facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/FCW
temporarily occur.
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
examine the windshield and the camera located on the functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a
key cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized
dealer.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Offset Driving Condition Example
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
Turns
And
Bends
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
3
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising
speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode,
the system will not react to vehicles ahead. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
To change between the different cruise control modes, To Set A Desired Speed
press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
(Fixed Speed) CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the NORMAL
ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired
(Fixed Speed) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF button will
speed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
Speed) Cruise Control mode.
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the electronic speed control is SET.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released. Release
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
the button when the desired speed is reached, and the
you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. If
new set speed will be established.
the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
new set speed will be established.
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, the
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the
SET - button. If the button is continually pressed, the set
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h)
you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding
increments until the button is released. The decrease in
the SET + button. If the button is continually pressed, the
set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h)
increments until the button is released. The increase in set To Cancel
speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
To decrease speed while the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is
• The brake pedal is applied.
To Vary The Speed Setting
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You press the CANCEL button.
To Turn Off
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
ON/OFF button.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over• You turn off the ignition.
heated).
• The shift lever is removed from the Drive position.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume Speed
• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
button.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
20 mph (32 km/h).
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
visual warnings (within the EVIC), and may apply a braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential system will compensate and provide additional brake
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are force as required.
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
3
FCW Message
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle • The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
message will be deactivated.
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range,
NOTE:
the FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h).
WARNING!
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after 4 Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
The forward collision button is located on the switch Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
panel below the Uconnect® display.
To Change The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision Settings With Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A System Screen — If
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
Equipped.
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward Follow these steps to set the FCW Sensitivity and Active
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns Braking:
off).
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
the Uconnect® display.
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
in front of you.
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the 3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or 4. Press the “FWD Collision Warning”, Far or Near
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
soft-key for your desired preference.
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
5. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the setting.
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Change The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking
Settings With Uconnect® 5.0 System Screen — If
Equipped.
6. Press the second “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.
7. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Follow these steps to set the FCW Sensitivity and Active
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
Braking:
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
1. Press the “+ MORE” hard-key located on the lower front of you when you are farther away and it applies
right side of the Uconnect® system.
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
3. Press the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key.
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
4. Press the first “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
5. Press the “FWD Collision Warning” Far or Near which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
soft-key for your desired preference. Then press the
back arrow.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.
Once the condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see your
authorized dealer.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
Service FCW Warning
higher rate of speed.
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays:
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/ This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, the system checked by an authorized dealer.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in the EVIC indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
ParkSense® Sensors
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
changed to the ON/RUN position.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inPark Assist Ready
formation.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
ParkSense® Display
the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will display
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
the park assist ready system status.
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second
tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
3
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arc
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
4th Solid
3rd
Solid
Yes
Yes
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch.
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense® will not operate.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and the
system requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENblink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
System
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per authorized dealer.
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” • When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC will
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damdisplay “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
age the sensors.
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
NOTE:
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, • Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system opernot to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
ating properly.
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
(Continued)
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense® Sensors
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
changed to the ON/RUN position.
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately direction, depending on the location, type and orienta7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning will tion of the obstacle.
appear in the EVIC indicating the vehicle is above The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
ParkSense® operating speed. The system will become bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding Your InstruPark Assist Ready
ment Panel” for further information.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
ParkSense® Display
the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
The warning display will turn ON indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected. the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast,
to continuous.
3
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
Arcs
Radio Volume
Reduced
None
No
WARNING
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
Single 1/2
Second Tone
(for rear only)
4th Solid
Yes
ALERTS
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
Slow (for rear
only)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Continuous
3rd Solid
Yes
2nd Flashing
Yes
1st Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped.
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
If Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume settings disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
will not be accessible from the EVIC.
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and the
through ignition cycles.
system requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
ParkSense® switch.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
disable the system, the instrument cluster will will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the shift lever is moved to Reverse and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display a
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car
graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object
is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The
car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
system operating properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense®
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
• There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
shifting out of ⬙REVERSE⬙ unless the forward vehicle
EQUIPPED
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ or the ignition is switched to the OFF
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen position.
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the center
of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/receiver.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Uconnect® 5.0
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the system is turned ON.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the “Parkview Backup camera” soft-key to turn
the ParkView® system ON or OFF.
NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box to
indicate the system is turned ON.
3
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
mitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to proTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
follow these steps:
view.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
button you want to program and the hand-held transthe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
mitter button.
not release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programcator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
steps.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
from slow to rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
before 1995.
and observe the indicator light.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transfollow these steps:
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner.
not release the button.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all door or gate motor.
remaining steps.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
fully trained.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
follow these steps:
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
door may open and close while you are programming.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
not release the button.
and observe the indicator light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/ To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
remaining steps.
erased.
Using HomeLink®
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink®
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security Troubleshooting Tips
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any here are some of the most common solutions:
time.
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitSecurity
ter.
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
in your vehicle.
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
General Information
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. Do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Closing Sunroof — Express
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucPress the switch forward and release it within one-half
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
release to Express Close.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
the sunroof.
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Venting Sunroof — Express
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition OFF Operation
open.
The power sunroof switches remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has
Wind Buffeting
been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Elecpressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Setears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Underwindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to The CommandView® sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView® Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. Do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go™ in the ACC or ON/Run mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
Opening Sunroof — Express
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiPress the switch rearward and release it within one-half cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati- Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will the sunroof.
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open.” During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Opening Power Shade — Express
Closing Power Shade — Express
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will open automatically from
any position. The shade will open and stop automatically at
the half-open position. Press the shade switch rearward
again and release it within one-half second and the shade
will open automatically to the full-open position. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the shade switch will stop the shade.
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward. completely.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
rearward again.
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half seca Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of Wind Buffeting
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
opening to the Vent position.
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
Pinch Protect Feature
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- minimize the buffeting or open any window.
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Venting Sunroof — Express
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Sunroof Maintenance
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
the glass panel.
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
The power sunroof switches can be programmed to “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Refer to “Elec- the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer- outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under- the battery and powered at all times.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
NOTE: Opening either front door will cancel this fea• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
ture.
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
Sunroof Fully Closed
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®
knob and element must be used.
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
area.
3
Center Console Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched to “battery” powered all the time by switching the power outlet
right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Power Inverter
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload CUPHOLDERS
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once located in the center console.
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Front Cupholders
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Door Storage
latch and lower the glove compartment door.
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
3
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
The center console contains both an upper and a lower the small latch located on the lid.
storage area.
Console Features
Storage Compartment Latches
Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
3
Lower Storage Compartment
CD/DVD Player — If Equipped
Lower Storage Compartment
Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player
located in the center console.
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
Press And Release
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer, the passenger side cargo area will not be available.
3
Three-Press Switch
Cargo Storage Bins
There are four removable storage bins located in the rear
cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either
side of the cargo area.
Rear Storage Bin
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
Lower Storage Bins
Tether Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
3
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Cargo Cover
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
(Continued)
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the mulRotating the center portion upward once more
tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
will activate the washer pump which will conThe rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
located at the middle of the lever.
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the pump will resume normal operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the
rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
position.
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized • To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
dealer can order and install MOPAR® crossbars built
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approxispecifically for this roof rack system.
mately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo • If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight
turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the • The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
MOPAR® crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between
the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .288
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .301
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Battery Saver Mode/Battery Saver On
Message — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ EVIC Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ EVIC Green Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .313
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Blu-Ray Player Remote Control –
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .358
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .368
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .358
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
䡵 Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .371
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Blu-ray™ Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF
. . . .378
. . . .379
. . . .379
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
䡵 CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc™ MAINTENANCE . . . .379
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .380
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .389
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin (SD Card, AUX, USB Media Hub)
9 — ESC Button
10 — Ignition Switch
11 — Hood Release
12 — Fuel Door Release
13 — Headlight Switch
14 — Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
8. Speedometer
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog Indicates vehicle speed.
lights are on.
9. Selectable EVIC Information
6. Selectable EVIC Information
This area of the cluster will display selectable informaThis area of the cluster will display selectable informa- tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informafurther information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your owners
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your owners manual for more information.
manual for more information.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
7. Turn Signal Indicator
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn sigan onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
nals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone
monitors engine and automatic transmission conwill chime, and an EVIC message will appear if either trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
for a defective outside light bulb.
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced
if the light stays on through several of your typical
driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
11. Electronic Park Brake Failure Indicator — If
Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Parking
Brake system requires service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
12. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
13. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
dropped below a specified level.
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by 15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apshould be checked monthly when cold and inproximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
inspected by an authorized dealer.
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
tion.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumiNOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
14. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
where the fuel door is located. The pointer shows the causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
the ON/RUN position.
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
(EVIC) When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information CenThe odometer display shows the total distance the veter” of your owners manual for more information.
hicle has been driven.
17. Selectable EVIC Menu
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the This area of the cluster will display the EVIC selectable
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your menu. For further information, refer to “Electronic Veodometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair hicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your
technician should leave the odometer reading the same owners manual for more information.
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
18. Air Bag Warning Light
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
must be reset at zero.
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” of your owners manual for further information.
16. Electronic Vehicle Information
Display/Odometer Display
Center
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
19. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
21. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
22. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
4
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Location
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful • Speed Warning
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
• Diagnostic Codes
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
The system allows the driver to select information by
• Main Gauge
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
• MPH to km/h
wheel:
• Vehicle Info
• Terrain — If Equipped
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
EVIC Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
• UP Arrow Button
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
Press and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
upward through the main menu and subscreens of a main menu item.
menus (Main Gauge, MPH/km/h, Vehicle
Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip
• OK Button
A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
Press the OK button to access/select the information
• DOWN Arrow Button
screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Press
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to and hold the OK arrow button for two seconds to reset
scroll downward through the main menu and displayed/selected features that can be reset.
submenus (Main Gauge, MPH/km/h, Vehicle
Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip
A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
7. Air Suspension Status
8. 4WD Status
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
9. Selectable Gauge 2
cluster and consists of multiple sections:
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will 10. Selectable Gauge 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for The main display area will normally display the main
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
white for on demand information.
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warnAudio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informaing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the
into several categories:
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
• Five Second Stored Messages
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
Telltales/Indicators
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to condition that activated it remains active) and can be
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in • Five Second Unstored Messages
the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
message takes control of the main display area for five
and “Low Tire Pressure”.
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
• Unstored Messages
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On”.
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples Engine Oil Change Indicator System
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
Oil Change Required
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
upon your personal driving style.
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
• Service Airbag System
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/ RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
• Traction Control Off
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times •
within 10 seconds.
•
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
•
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
•
Washer Fluid Low
Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due
Fuel Low
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Lights On
• Cruise Off
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Ready
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Turn Signal On
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire •
to XX”
•
• Service Tire Pressure System
•
• Parking Brake Engaged
•
• Brake Fluid Low
•
• Service Electronic Braking System
•
• Engine Temperature Hot
•
Vehicle Not in Park
Key in Ignition
Key in Ignition Lights On
Remote Start Active Key to Run
Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Service Airbag System
• Service Transmission
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Service Shifter
• Door Open
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Doors Open
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Liftgate Open
• Washer Fluid Low
• Gear Not Available
• Service Air Suspension System
• Shift Not Allowed
• Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
Battery Saver Mode/Battery Saver On Message —
If Equipped
When the ⬙Battery Saver Mode⬙ or “Battery Saver On⬙
message is displayed, the vehicle will turn off certain
Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
electrical functions to reduce battery energy consumption. This will occur during periods when the battery is
Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
not being adequately charged. During this time, the
Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
following features (if equipped) may be turned off or will
operate at a reduced power level: heated seats and heated
Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
steering wheel, heated or cooled cup-holder, rear deEntry/Exit Watch For Clearance
froster and heated mirrors, heating and air conditioning,
Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For jacking And power inverter, audio and telematics system.
Tire Change
This condition is temporary and recoverable, this is for
• Service Air Suspension System Immediately
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
driver information only.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tellturns off.
tales. These telltales include:
• Service Forward Collision Warming
• Low Fuel Telltale
EVIC Amber Telltales
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal This light warns the driver of a potential collision with
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until the vehicle in front and prompts the driver to take action
in order to avoid the collision. For further information,
fuel is added.
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind- • Service Adaptive Cruise Control
shield washer fluid is low.
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further infor• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
This telltale indicates that the transmission
Your
Vehicle.”
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
• Electronic Park Brake Failure
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
dealer for assistance.
EVIC Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authooff the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
rized dealer.
four minutes when this light turns on.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting required. You may experience reduced performance, an
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
This light warns of an overheated engine condiElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge aplight will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veIf the light remains lit with the engine running, your
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authonormal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
• Electric Power Steering Malfunction – If Equipped
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
This telltale is on when the Electric Power Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
Steering is not operating and needs service.
EVIC.
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
may be ajar.
EVIC Green Telltales
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green when the
electronic speed control is SET. For further
information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
Digital Speedometer
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Digital display icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button
to scroll through the sub-menus and press the
OK button to change the display between Digital Speedometer or Analog Speedometer.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
will be displayed:
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
button and Coolant Temp will be displayed. displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll through ICON.
the information sub-menus and press the OK button to
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
select or reset the following resettable sub-menus:
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
Air Suspension – If Equipped
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
color than the other tire pressure value.
Only
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Oil Temp
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Tire Pressure
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” Trip B
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
From the Trip A menu press and release the
Left or Right arrow button until the Trip B icon
is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left or right
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip B informabutton until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
tion will display the following:
the EVIC (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or
Trip B). The Trip A information will display the • Distance
following:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance
• Elapsed Time
• Average Fuel Economy
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
• Elapsed Time
Fuel Economy
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Trip A
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is
highlighted.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or Screen Setup
L/100 km with Bargraph)
• Range To Empty (RTE)
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Screen Setup display icon is
• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen
Stored Messages
Setup feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
Press and release the UP arrow button until the
that information is displayed.
Messages display icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. This feature shows the number of stored Driver Assist
warning messages. Pressing the RIGHT arrow
button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
Audio
button until the Driver Assist display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
— If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
button until the Audio display icon is highVehicle”.
lighted in the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Terrain
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Odometer
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Terrain display icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
RIGHT arrow button to display the SelecTerrain, Air Suspension, Drivetrain, Vehicle Pitch, Vehicle
Roll, Vehicle Altitude and Wheel Articulation.
• Standard (PRND) Gear Indicator
Diagnostics — If Equipped
• Compass
• Single Character (D) Gear Indicator
Upper Left
• None
• Outside Temp (default setting)
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
• Current Gear: ON/OFF
button until the Diagnostics display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the • Current Gear
RIGHT arrow button to display the diagnostic
• Gear Display
trouble codes and descriptions.
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Average MPG/L/100km
• Current MPG/L/100km
• Current MPG/L/100km
• Trip A
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Trip B
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
Upper Right
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Cancel
• Okay
• Outside Temp
Uconnect® SETTINGS
• Time
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average MPG/L/100km
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
4
Uconnect® 5.0 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
Uconnect® 8.4 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hard-Keys
Soft-Keys
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® system in
the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 5.0 Settings
Press the Settings hard-key to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped such as
Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation,
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Compass Settings, Audio and Phone/Bluetooth.
Back hard-keys located below the system.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off the Uconnect®
time.
screen. Press the Screen Off hard-key a second time to
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
turn the screen on.
desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and
Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu or certain
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
option on the Uconnect® system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back
Arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to the
previous menu or press the X soft-key to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft-keys
on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up
or down through the available settings.
Display
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness
with the + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness
will be available:
with the + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting any
• Display Mode
point on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. Then
When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual touch the arrow back soft-key.
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and • Set Language
release the Auto or Manual soft-key. Then touch the
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
arrow back soft-key.
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch the Set Language
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
soft-key, then touch the desired language soft-key until a • Show Command List
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
When in this display, you may choose to Never /
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
w/Help or Always display the Teleprompter with posto return to the previous menu.
sible options while in a voice session. To change the Show
• Units
Command List, touch the Never / w/Help or Always
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting, • Touchscreen Beep
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is
• Voice Response Length
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
When in this display, you may change the Voice Resetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
to return to the previous menu.
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. If
24h is selected, AM/PM soft-keys will be greyed out
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
(unavailable).
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make • Sync Date
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In When in this display, you may choose to set the date
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the automatically. Touch the Sync Date soft-key until a
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
Clock
to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings • Set Date
will be available:
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
• Time and Format
Touch the Set Date soft-key until a check-mark appears
When in this display, you may set the time and choose next to the setting, showing that setting has been sethe format to display the time. Touch the 12h / 24h / AM lected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
and/or PM soft-key until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the folVehicle”.
lowing settings will be available:
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped
Safety / Assistance
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, touch and release the Near or Far button.
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, touch the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. For further information,
refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
• ParkSense®
ParkSense® Front Chime Volume soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled • Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
ParkSense® status, touch and release the Sound Only or selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper- is MEDIUM. To make your selection, touch the
ating information.
ParkSense® Rear Chime Volume soft-key, until a check• Front ParkSense® Chime Volume
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its
selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if
last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, touch the
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkSense® Park Assist Braking
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
previous menu.
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle. To make your • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Strength — If
selection, touch the ParkSense® Park Assist Braking Equipped
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer The amount of directional torque the steering system can
to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding The apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper- departure can be set at Low, Medium or High. To make
ating information.
your selection, touch the Lane Departure Warning soft• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
key until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets the distance at
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
which the steering wheel will provide feedback for
potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set • Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
to provide either an early, medium or late warning zone When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
start point. To make your selection, touch the Lane mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
Departure Warning soft-key, until a check-mark appears RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
• Paddle Shifting
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Selecting this feature enables the use of steering wheel Blind Spot Alert status, touch the Off, Lights or Lights &
paddle switches for shifting in manual mode. To make Chime soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
your selection, touch the Paddle Shifting soft-key, until a
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
to return to the previous menu.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
• Blind Spot Alert
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature in the BSM not operating to specification.
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkView® Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
touch the ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see
straight grid line overlay over the ParkView Back up
camera display whenever the shift lever is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera Static
Gridlines soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
“Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key. Press the
“Parkview Backup camera Delay” soft-key to turn the
ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” soft-key, the “settings” soft-key, then the
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been • Auto Park Brake (manual vehicles)
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will automatiprevious menu.
cally set the Park Brake at key off. To make your selection,
• Brake Service
touch the Auto Park Brake soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had
This feature will be grayed out while vehicle is in motion.
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
When this feature is selected, it will allow the service of
the previous menu.
the rear brake components. To make your selection touch
the Brake Service soft-key, until a check-mark appears • Hold ’n Go™
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will automatiselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
cally hold its position when it comes to a stop. To make
previous menu.
your selection, touch the Hold ’n Go™ soft-key until a
• Auto Park Brake (automatic vehicles)
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will automatito return to the previous menu.
cally set the Park Brake when the vehicle is shifted to
park. To make your selection, touch the Auto Park Brake Lights
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
will be available.
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• Interior Ambient Lights
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the brightness of the interior ambient lighting. To change
the Interior Ambient Lights setting, touch the + or soft-key to select your desired Interior Ambient Light
level. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, touch the Headlights Off Delay soft-key, and
choose either 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. A check-mark
appears next to setting indicating that the setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If Equipped
• Flash Headlights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto High
Beams soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu. Refer to “Lights / SmartBeam™ — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Headlights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
settings will be available:
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When 1st
Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press the
• Sound Horn With Lock
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the pasWhen this feature is selected, the horn will sound when senger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is
the door locks are activated. To make your selection, selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a check- RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry
the previous menu.
equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, touching the
handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
opening. If driver door first is selected, once the driver door
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
return to the previous menu.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door
handle is grabbed. To make your selection, touch the
Passive Entry soft-key until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Power Lift Gate Alert
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is
raising or lowering. To make your selection, touch the
Power Lift Gate Alert soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
• Memory To FOB — If Equipped
previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
further information.
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the folsoft-key the following settings will be available:
lowing settings will be available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
Seats soft-key, then select either Off, Remote Start or All
Starts until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
return to the previous menu.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
Compass Settings — If Equipped
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the following settings will be available:
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Perform Compass Calibration
• Equalizer
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
will be available:
back soft-key.
• Balance/Fade
Audio
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Surround Sound
Phone/Bluetooth®
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-key the folTo make your selection, touch the Surround Sound lowing settings will be available:
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow • Paired Devices
back soft-key.
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
• AUX Volume Match — If Equipped
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Air Suspension — If Equipped
To make your selection, touch the AUX Volume Match
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow After pressing the Suspension soft-key the following
settings will be available:
back soft-key.
• Loudness — If Equipped
• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
To make your selection, touch the Loudness soft-key,
select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back
soft-key.
When this feature is selected, the vehicle automatically
lowers from ride height position when vehicle shifted to
park for easy entry/exit. Touch the box next to your
selection and a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
• Suspension Display Messages
• Wheel Alignment Mode
When All is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will be This feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension
displayed. When Warnings Only is selected only the Air while performing a wheel alignment service. Before
Suspension Warnings will be displayed.
performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further infor• Tire Jack Mode
mation.
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while SiriusXM Setup
the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire. Touch the box next to After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following
your selection and a check-mark appears next to the feature settings will be available:
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is
• Channel Skip
removed showing the system has been deactivated.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
• Transport Mode
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
disabled to assist with flat bed towing. Touch the box next to your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
your selection and a check-mark appears next to the feature channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is arrow back soft-key.
removed showing the system has been deactivated.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Subscription Information
Radio Setup
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to resubscribe.
After pressing the Radio Setup soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Traffic Announcement — If Equipped
When this feature is selected it allows the system to pause
receivers and media to issue a traffic bulletin. To change
the Traffic Announcement setting touch the Off or On
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub- soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
scription Information screen.
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To • Alternative Frequency — If Equipped
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
When this feature is selected it allows the frequency to
the screen or visit the provider online.
change automatically to maintain the strongest signal To
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription change the Alternative Frequency setting touch the Off or
and is available for U.S. residents only.
On soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
• Regional
Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it forces regional servicefollowing enabling automatic switching to network stations. To change the Regional setting touch the Off or On
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings soft-key
the following settings will be available:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To Clear PerRestore Settings
sonal Data touch the Yes or No soft-key. A check mark
After pressing the Restore Settings soft-key the following will appear in the box when selected. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock,
Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. To restore the
settings to their default setting touch the Yes or No
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 8.4 Settings
Press the Apps soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect®
system allows you to access programmable features that
may be equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance,
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, • Display Mode
Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
When in this display you may select one of the auto
Bluetooth and SiriusXM Setup.
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the
time.
arrow back soft-key.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete either press the Back
Arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to the
previous menu or press the X soft-key to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft-keys
on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up
or down through the available settings.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
Display
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
will be available.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• Set Language
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Set Time Hours
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection, touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen.
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection, touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the
hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
Clock
return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings close out of the settings screen.
will be available.
• Set Time Minutes
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, touch
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Time Format
When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back the FCW status, touch and release the Near or Far button.
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the folVehicle”.
lowing settings will be available:
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped
Safety / Assistance
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, touch the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. For further information,
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitiga- departure can be set at Low, Medium or High. To make
tion” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.” your selection, touch the Lane Departure Warning softkey until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
that the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets the distance at soft-key to return to the previous menu.
which the steering wheel will provide feedback for
• ParkSense®
potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set
to provide either an early, medium or late warning zone The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
start point. To make your selection, touch the Lane vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
Departure Warning soft-key, until a check-mark appears and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
previous menu.
ParkSense® status, touch and release the Sound Only or
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Strength — If
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back
Equipped
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and opersteering wheel feedback for potential lane departures. ating information.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
• Front ParkSense® Chime Volume
ParkSense® Rear Chime Volume soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if
return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, touch the • ParkSense® Park Assist Braking
ParkSense® Front Chime Volume soft-key, until a check- When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to autonomous braking to stop the vehicle. To make your
return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its selection, touch the ParkSense® Park Assist Braking
last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
• Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding The
selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operequipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
ating information.
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, touch the
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
• Paddle Shifting
Blind Spot Alert status, touch the Off, Lights or Lights &
Selecting this feature enables the use of steering wheel Chime soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
paddle switches for shifting in manual mode. To make
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
your selection, touch the Paddle Shifting soft-key, until a
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result • ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
• ParkView® Backup Camera
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
display along with a caution note to “check entire surthe shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five secdisplayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
touch the ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that • ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines
the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see
straight grid line overlay over the ParkView Back up
camera display whenever the shift lever is put into
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera Static
Gridlines soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” soft-key, the “settings” soft-key, then the
“Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key. Press the
“Parkview Backup camera Delay” soft-key to turn the
ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines • Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Hold ’n Go™
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will automatically hold its position when it comes to a stop To make
• Brake Service
your selection, touch the Hold ’n Go™ soft-key, until a
This feature will be grayed out while vehicle is in motion. check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
When this feature is selected, it will allow the service of setting had been selected. Touch the back row soft-key to
the rear brake components. To make your selection touch return to the previous menu.
the Brake Service soft-key, until a check-mark appears
Lights
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
will be available.
previous menu.
• Auto Park Brake
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will automatically set the Park Brake when the vehicle is shifted to
park. To make your selection, touch the Auto Park Brake
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams softinterval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the key, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
previous menu.
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
“Lights / SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “UnderstandWhen this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further informain the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap- tion.
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft- whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
key, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If
Equipped
• Flash Headlights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Headlights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
Doors & Locks
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following • Sound Horn With Remote Start
settings will be available.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
• Auto Unlock On Exit
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock to return to the previous menu.
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the • 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, touching the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If Driver’s Door first
is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior
door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors
(or use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless EnterN-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Memory To FOB — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Touch
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
soft-key the following settings will be available.
Engine Off Options
• Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0 seconds, 45
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
• Headlight Off Delay
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off differences, and provide the most accurate compass
Delay status, touch the + or - soft-key to select your heading.
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials, such as iPod’s, Mobile
return to the previous menu.
Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors, away from the top
of the instrument panel where the compass module is
located. These materials can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Balance/Fade
Compass Variance Map
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
• Perform Compass Calibration
• Equalizer
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your To make your selection, touch the AUX Volume Match
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
back soft-key.
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
• Loudness — If Equipped
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
To make your selection, touch the Loudness soft-key,
select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back
soft-key.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
Phone/Bluetooth®
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-key the folsoft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow lowing settings will be available:
back soft-key.
• Paired Devices
• AUX Volume Match — If Equipped
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level / Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the
for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Air Suspension — If Equipped
• Tire Jack Mode
After pressing the Suspension soft-key the following When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
settings will be available.
disabled to assist with changing a spare tire. Touch the
box next to your selection and a check-mark appears next
• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
to the feature showing the system has been activated or
When this feature is selected, the vehicle lowers the the check-mark is removed showing the system has been
suspension for easy entry/exit. Touch the box next to deactivated.
your selection and a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the • Transport Mode
check-mark is removed showing the system has been When this feature is selected the air suspension system is
deactivated.
disabled to assist with flat bed towing. Touch the box
next to your selection and a check-mark appears next to
• Suspension Display Messages
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
When All is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will be check-mark is removed showing the system has been
displayed. When Warnings Only is selected only the Air deactivated.
Suspension Warnings will be displayed.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Wheel Alignment Mode
• Subscription Information
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
information.
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
SiriusXM Setup
the Subscription Information screen in order to reAfter pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following subscribe.
settings will be available:
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub• Channel Skip
scription Information screen.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Radio Setup
• Regional
After pressing the Radio Setup soft-key the following When this feature is selected it forces regional servicesettings will be available.
following enabling automatic switching to network stations. To change the Regional setting touch the Off or On
• Traffic Announcement — If Equipped
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
When this feature is selected it allows the system to pause selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
receivers and media to issue a traffic bulletin. To change
the Traffic Announcement setting touch the Off or On Restore Settings
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when After pressing the Restore Settings soft-key the following
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
settings will be available:
• Alternative Frequency — If Equipped
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it allows the frequency to
change automatically to maintain the strongest signal To
change the Alternative Frequency setting touch the Off or
On soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock,
Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. To restore the
settings to their default setting touch the Yes or No
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings soft-key
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
the following settings will be available:
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
• Clear Personal Data
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® SuppleWhen this feature is selected it will remove personal data ment Manual.
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To Clear Personal Data touch the Yes or No soft-key. A check mark Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
will appear in the box when selected. Then touch the SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
arrow back soft-key.
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
Clear Personal Data
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your
favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio, the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
standard video games or audio devices. Please review
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
and operation.
Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature
allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Getting Started
• Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the • Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-Ray Disc
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
Player. If equipped with a Blu-Ray Disc Player, the
icon will be present on the Player.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by pressing the Power button on the remote control.
4
Rear Seat Entertainment System Screen
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/BluRay Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s)
turn(s) ON automatically, the headphone transmitters
turn ON and playback begins.
Rear Seat Entertainment System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2
(passenger’s side).
Rear Seat Entertainment System Remote Control
Channel Selector
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
4
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Headphone Channel Selector
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the
rear seat occupants using the remote control.
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blu-ray™ Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray player is located in the center console.
To view a Blu-ray insert the disc into the Blu-ray disc
Player. Playback will begin automatically after the Bluray disc is recognized by the disc drive. If playback does
not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into
Blu-ray disc Player follow these steps:
Using the Touchscreen Radio
Blu-ray player location
Rear Media Control Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
• Press the Media soft-key, then touch the Rear Media Play Video Games
soft key.
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA/
• Touch the OK soft-key to begin playing the Blu-ray HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using the Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen),
then press the source key and using the up and down
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
4
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
and options.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
directly from a video camera, connect video games for Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3 Radio
player.
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray disc with the label facing as
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray disc player. The radio
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
audio/video jacks:
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
1. HDMI Input
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 (driver’s side
2. Right audio in (red)
rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and Head3. Left audio in (white)
phone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
4. Video in (yellow)
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 (passenger’s
side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as PlaystaHeadphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter Using The Remote Control
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then press
1. Press the Media soft-key on the Uconnect® radio
ENTER/OK.
touchscreen.
2. Touch the Rear Media soft-key to display the Rear
Media Control screen.
4
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment
Screen
Rear Media Control Screen
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key, the select source soft-key and selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in
then the DISC soft-key in the MEDIA column. To exit the upper corner will turn OFF the remote control screen
functions.
touch the X at the top right of the screen.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
• The Blu-Ray Player can play CDs, DVDs and Blu-Ray
Discs.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source
will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
• Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source
will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
NOTE: Touching the screen on a Touchscreen radio while • Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
a DVD or Blu-ray disc is playing, brings up the basic
remote control functions for DVD play such as scene
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Blu-Ray Player Remote Control – If Equipped
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE – Press to enter Source Selection screen.
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
5. 䉴 – Press to navigate menus.
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone 6. SETUP – Press to access the screen settings menu.
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. 䉴䉴 – Press and hold to fast forward through the 16. 䉲 – Press to navigate menus.
current audio track or video chapter.
17. OK – Press to select the highlighted option in a menu.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
18. 䉳 – Press to navigate menus.
9. Four Colored Buttons – Press to access Blu-Ray disc
19. 䉱 – Press to navigate menus.
features.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
10. POPUP/MENU – Press to bring up repeat and
shuffle options, the Blu ray popup menu, the DVD The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
title menu or to access disc menus.
11. KEYPAD – Press to navigate chapters or titles.
12. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
13. 䉳䉳 – Press and hold to fast rewind through the
current audio track or video chapter.
14. Mutes headphone audio.
15. BACK – Press to exit out of menus or return to source
selection screen.
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on
the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
4
1. Power Button
2. Volume Control
3. Channel Selection Switch
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
NOTE:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the
Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the
Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Press the SOURCE button on the remote control.
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone 3. Pressing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode.
selector switch.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and press the OK button to
select the new mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferBACK button on the remote control.
able.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
as long as you own the Product.
operation. To replace the batteries:
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover use is defective in workmanship or materials.
downward.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them does not cover any damage or defect that results from
according to the polarity diagram shown.
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replaceUnwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
Warranty
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTthe initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-2933332 or email [email protected]
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® re- the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Display Settings
the video on the screen. The factory default settings are
already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to
change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray player’s settings
of DVD being watched in the remote player.
Video Screen Display Settings
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
When watching a video source (Blu-ray or DVD Video To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the screen closed:
remote control’s SETUP button activates the Display • Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Close the video screen.
Disc Formats
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote The Blu-Ray player is capable of the playing the followcontrol’s SOURCE button. This will automatically se- ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
lect the next available audio mode without using the • BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1),
Mode/Source Select menu.
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
DVD-VR
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
profile 3.0
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play and will be ejected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray player may not be able to play
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray player,
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
help avoid playback problems, use the following guideVideo title is ignored). All multi-channel program matelines when recording discs.
rial is automatically mixed down to two channels, which
may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you • Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
increase the volume level to account for this change in
closed are playable.
level, remember to lower the volume before changing the
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDdisc or to another mode.
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
Recorded Discs
each track number is unique.
DVD Audio Support
The Blu-ray player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs • For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
supported.
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or re• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
corded) are not supported.
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the Blu-ray player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about • For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs • Any file that is copy protected (such as those down(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
begin playing the next available file.
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
player will automatically skip the file and begin playThe Blu-ray player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
ing the next available file.
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
• The Blu-ray player always uses the file extension to
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
supported. For both formats, the recommended visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
end of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray player will return
Blu-ray player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file,
to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start
or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or
of the first track.
previous file.
The Blu-ray player may shut down during extremely hot
• To change the current directory, use the remote conconditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperatrol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip
ture is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this occurs, the
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the
Disc Errors
Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is reached.
This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the
If the Blu-ray player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc
Blu-ray player.
Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio
displays and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, Product Agreement
damaged, or incompatible disc format are all potential This product incorporates copyright protection technolcauses for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured access the switches.
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a after the current track begins to play.
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
control is different depending on which mode you are in. second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc™ MAINTENANCE
each mode.
To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc™ in good condition,
Radio Operation
take the following precautions:
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
wiping from center to edge.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
or anti-static sprays.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
CLIMATE CONTROLS
General Overview
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to Hard-Keys
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
The hard-keys are located below the Uconnect® screen.
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
4
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-Keys
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-Keys And 4. AUTO Operation Button
Soft-Keys)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
1. MAX A/C Button
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the ATC to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
3. Recirculation Button
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
indicator illuminates when ON.
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window 7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
turns off after 10 minutes.
control. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
CAUTION!
soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to for warmer temperature settings.
the heating elements:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear automatically exit Sync.
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth 8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the Provides the passenger with independent temperature
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after control. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
soaking with warm water.
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the soft• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key for
window cleaners on the interior surface of the cooler temperature settings.
window.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
automatically exit Sync.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
9. SYNC
Soft-Key
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
Hard-Key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Defrost Mode
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When the defrost mode is
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conselected, the blower level may will increase.
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
12. Climate Control OFF Button
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount ON/OFF.
of air is directed through the defrost and side 13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
window demister outlets.
Provides the driver with independent temperature con• Mix Mode
trol. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the softdemist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key for
snowy conditions.
cooler temperature settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
area indicates cooler temperatures.
time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Climate Control Functions
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the softkey temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key for
warmer temperature settings.
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
time.
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
15. Temperature Control (5.0 Radio Only)
NOTE:
Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than Recirculation
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
MAX A/C
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforNOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
mance.
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed out) if
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
is ON.
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate ConIn MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculawill cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink NOTE:
and then turn off.
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
Automatic Operation
comfort as quickly as possible.
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
units by selecting the Uconnect® customerprogrammable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® Sys2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pastem Settings” in this section of the manual.
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons (8, 9,
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
14, 15). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
system will achieve and automatically maintain that on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
comfort level.
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Manual Operation Override
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation consystem to function automatically.
trol.
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
Winter Operation
Operating Tips
Vacation Storage
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
tions.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
Summer Operation
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instrucperiods, as fogging may occur.
tions.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
NOTE:
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .407
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .408
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .404
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Quadra-Trac I® Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Quadra-Trac II® Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Quadra-Lift™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Quadra-Drive® II System — If Equipped . . . . .426
▫ When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN™ — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .427
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
䡵 QUADRA-LIFT™ — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .448
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Ready Alert Braking — If Equipped . . . . . . . .457
▫ Rain Brake Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
(Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023
Two-Speed Transfer Case Only) . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Select Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
(Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023
Two-Speed Transfer Case Only) . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .473
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .478
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .481
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .488
▫ All Season Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .482 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .490
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires —
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning . . . . . . . .
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . .483
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Full Size Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .484
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .484
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
. .491
. .494
. .495
. .496
. .499
. .499
. .499
. .499
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .501
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .510
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . .518
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .527
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive
䡵 SNOW PLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra–
Trac II® /Quadra–Drive® II Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ACC or RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
(Continued)
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
1. Place the shift lever/shift selector in PARK, then press
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
in the ACC position until the shift lever/shift selector
the engine starting, press the button again.
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
position. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
accelerator pedal.
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC will
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
display “ON/RUN”),
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
OFF position.
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC will
display “OFF”).
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
NEUTRAL Position)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC will display
“ACC”),
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
CAUTION!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one Damage to the transmission may occur if the followhour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
The engine block heater cord is located:
a complete stop.
• 3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the engine oil • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
dipstick tube.
idle speed.
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
(Continued)
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehithe transmission in PARK.
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condiThis system also locks the transmission in PARK when- tions. Press the “eco” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel and a amber light will indicate the ECO
ever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
mode is engaged.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
5
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the shifter. Instead, the shift lever is spring loaded and moves
forward and rearward, always returning to the center
vehicle control systems will change the following:
position after each gear is selected. The transmission gear
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
(PRND) is displayed both on the shift lever and in the
later.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To select a
• The overall driving performance will be more conser- gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever and
move the lever rearward or forward. You must press the
vative.
brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibshift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
ited based on temperature and other factors.
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
NOTE: When Sport Mode is enabled, the vehicle’s air “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this secsuspension system will operate in “Aero” Mode. Please tion). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
refer to “Quadra Lift” within this section for further PARK to DRIVE), move the lever past the first (or second)
detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
information.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
efficient eight-speed transmission. The electronic shift
lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and SPORT shift positions. Once in
the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rearward will
toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE mode. You do
not need to press the shift lever button when toggling
Shift Lever
between DRIVE and SPORT modes. Manual shifts can be Gear Ranges
made using the shift paddles mounted on the steering
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
wheel. Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this
section for further information.
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. transfer case is in a drive position.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission shifter. Do not leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible
to children), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in
the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must start the engine, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must start the engine, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi- periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
tion:
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and push the lever all the way forward until
WARNING!
it stops. When released, the lever will return to the
center position.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
gear position display and verify that it indicates the practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
PARK position.
vehicle and have a collision.
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Paddle Shift
switches (refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified dependThis range should be used for most city and highway ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down- vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- SPORT (S)
tics under all normal operating conditions.
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To
DRIVE (D)
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes, tap the shift illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
lever rearward. SPORT mode is only accessible from inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
DRIVE.
NOTE: When Sport Mode is enabled, the vehicle’s air In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
suspension system will operate in “Aero” Mode. Please can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
refer to “Quadra Lift” within this section for further following steps:
information.
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after enTransmission Limp Home Mode
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home 1. Stop the vehicle.
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. On
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, press and hold
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF.
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
5. Restart the engine.
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no This system can also provide you with more control
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situaoperation.
tions.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your Operation
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
recur.
available gears. To engage Paddle Shift mode, simply tap
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-)
while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter
service is required.
Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the
Paddle Shift Mode
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift
Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission mode will retain the current gear. When Paddle Shift
feature providing manual shift control, giving you more mode is active, the current transmission gear is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
of a vehicle speed.
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will progressively
downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
at the current speed.
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
fault or overheat condition is detected.
vehicle is accelerated.
NOTE: When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear enabled, Paddle Shift mode is not active. Pressing the
(or third gear, in 4LO range, Snow mode, or Sand (+/-) shift paddles in Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control
mode). Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in simply limits the highest allowed gear. Shifts below and
second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in up to that gear will occur automatically.
snowy or icy conditions.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
To disengage Paddle Shift mode, press and hold the (+)
shift paddle until ⬙D⬙ or ⬙S⬙ is once again displayed in the
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of Paddle Shift
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Quadra-Trac I® Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I® system is not appropriate
for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended.
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Quadra-Trac II® Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac II® transfer case is fully automatic in
the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac
II® transfer case provides three mode positions:
• 4WD HI
The Quadra-Trac I® is a single-speed (HI range only) • NEUTRAL
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time four- • 4WD LOW
wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode. Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at
WARNING!
the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD You or others could be injured if you leave the
LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
increased tire wear and damage to driveline components. NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move regardless of the transmission position. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
4WD AUTO
This range is used on surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel,
sand, and dry hard pavement.
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information on the various positions and their intended usages.
NEUTRAL
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in
the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
4WD LOW
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain.
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides
It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
an additional gear reduction which allows for increased
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operattorque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
ing” for further information.
while providing maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” for further information on the various positions and their
intended usages.
Shifting Procedures
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster
will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is
complete.
5
Transfer Case Switch
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection condition
exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put
Trans in N Press 4 Low” message will flash from the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster
will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer
case motor temperature protection condition exists, a
“For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans
in N Press 4 Low” message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow
the shift.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift™ air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information
Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (loTow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
cated by the selector switch) for one second.
Owners Manual” message will flash from the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
5
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
selector switch.
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
9. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
OFF.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
10. Release the brake pedal.
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
Quadra-Drive® II System — If Equipped
NOTE:
The optional Quadra-Drive® II System features two
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
torque transfer couplings. The couplings include an
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and
the Quadra-Trac II® transfer case. The optional ELSD
axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to
operate. Under normal driving conditions, the unit functions as a standard axle, balancing torque evenly between
left and right wheels. With a traction difference between
left and right wheels, the coupling will sense a speed
difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster than the
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
other, torque will automatically transfer from the wheel
that has less traction, to the wheel that has traction. While
the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design, their
operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II® transfer
case shifting information, preceding this section, for
shifting this system.
SELEC-TERRAIN™ — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Selec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
5
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
Selec-Terrain™ consists of the following positions:
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may
use second gear (rather than first gear) during
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped • Mud – Off road calibration for use on low traction
surfaces such as mud. Driveline is maximized for
with air suspension, the level will change to Normal
traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving
Ride Height (NRH) if the transfer case is in high range.
surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit
The level will change to Off-Road 1 if the transfer case
traction control management of throttle and wheel
is in Low range.
spin. If equipped with air suspension, the level will
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
change to Off-Road 1.
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide im- • Rock – Off-road calibration only available in 4WD
Low range. The vehicle is raised (if equipped with Air
proved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction
drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the
based tuning with improved steer-ability for use on
level will change to NRH.
high traction off-road surfaces. Activate the Hill De• Sand – Off road calibration for use on low traction
scent Control for steep downhill control. Use for low
surfaces such as sand or wet grass. Driveline is maxispeed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If
mized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less
equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will
forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set
change to Off-Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain™ switch is in
to limit traction control management of throttle and
ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched from
wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the level
4WD Low to 4WD High, the Selec-Terrain™ system
will change to Off-Road 1.
will return to AUTO.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
QUADRA-LIFT™ — IF EQUIPPED
Description
5
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system provides full
time load leveling capability along with the benefit of
vehicle height adjustment by the push of a button.
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Up Button
Down Button
Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While
in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to
OR1. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately
1.28 in (32.5 mm) – This is the primary position for all
off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A smoother and
more comfortable ride will result. Press the “Up” • Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.6 in
button once from the NRH position while the vehicle
(15 mm) – This position provides improved aerodyspeed is below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1
namics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will
position, if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph
automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle
(64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20
speed remains between 62 mph (99 km/h) and 66 mph
seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
(80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered to
speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will
NRH. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed
and Operating” for further information.
remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph
(56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h). The vehicle will
2.6 in (65 mm) – This position is intended for offenter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if the
roading use only where maximum ground clearance is
shift lever is in the “SPORT” position.
required. To enter OR2, press the “Up” button twice
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
NOTE: When ECO Mode is enabled the air suspension
system lowers the vehicle to Aero mode when the vehicle
(40 km/h) the Entry/Exit Mode change will be cancelled. To exit Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up” button
speed is between 52 mph (84 km/h) and 56 mph
once while in Entry/Exit Mode or drive the vehicle
(90 km/h) for 20 seconds or goes above 56 mph
over 15 mph (24 km/h).
(90 km/h). The vehicle will exit Aero mode if the vehicle
speed remains between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph
NOTE: Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/
(40 km/h) for 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls
Exit Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect® Touchbelow 20 mph (32 km/h).
Screen Radio. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately only lower if the shift lever is in ⬙PARK⬙, the terrain
1.6 in (40 mm) – This position lowers the vehicle for switch is in ⬙AUTO⬙, the transfer-case is in ⬙AUTO” and
easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the the vehicle level should be either in Normal or Aero
rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of Mode. The Vehicle will not automatically lower if the air
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Down” suspension level is in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle
button once from (NRH) while the vehicle speed is is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the
below 25 mph (40 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes lowering will be suppressed when the ignition is
below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin switched Off and the Door is Open to prevent setting the
to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph alarm Off.
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the
Selec-Terrain™ switch. The height can be changed from
the default Selec-Terrain™ setting by normal use of the
air suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain™” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure
a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift™ air
suspension system has a feature which allows the autoThe system requires that the engine be running for all matic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened Instrument Panel” for further information.
at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all
not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system uses a lifting done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect® Access
and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising further information.
the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and
then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will
move down first and then the rear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your
authorized dealer for service.
Air Suspension Modes
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system
has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit
height and disable the automatic load leveling system.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
the system in unique situations:
Wheel Alignment Mode
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling
to be disabled. Refer to “Uconnect® Access Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be
enabled. Refer to “Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
running.
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done
through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect® Access Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
has been detected.
to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
flashing on the “Up” button, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the
⬙Up⬙ button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
Pressing the “UP” button once will move the suspension
one position higher from the current position, assuming
all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, speed below
threshold, etc). The “UP” button can be pressed multiple
times, each press will raise the requested level by one
position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest
position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
speed, etc).
Pressing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, asThe indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show
suming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors
the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator
closed, speed below threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button
lamps will show a position which the system is working
can be pressed multiple times. Each press will lower the
Operation
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
requested level by one position down to a minimum of
Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on
current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic
changes and user requested changes.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5, and 6 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.
indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator
lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to
reduce speed. If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept
below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off
and indicator lamp 3 will flash until Entry/Exit Mode
is achieved at which point indicator lamp 3 will go
solid. If during the height change to Entry/Exit Mode,
the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the
height change will be paused until the vehicle speed
either goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) and the height
change continues to Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle height will return to
NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selected while the
vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still
running and all doors remain closed.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illumi- • Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit Mode. If
nated. Customer driving will disable Transport Mode.
Entry/Exit Mode is requested while vehicle speed is
between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h),
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Tire/Jack Mode - indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactoilluminated. Customer driving will disable Tire/Jack rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
Mode.
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
• Wheel Alignment Mode - indicator lamps 3 and 4 will
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
be illuminated. Customer driving will disable Wheel
Alignment Mode.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
NOTE: Prior to off-road driving, remove the front air
dam to prevent damage. The front air dam is attached to
the lower front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners
and can be removed by hand. The front license plate
bracket must be removed first if equipped.
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
or terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be
raised as required by the changes in terrain.
The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the optimized height based on the SelecTerrain™ switch position. The vehicle height can be
changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain™
mode by normal use of the air suspension switches. Refer
to “Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If Equipped
Front Air Dam
1 — Front Bumper
2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
Quadra-Lift™ — If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest
useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range
locks front and rear drivelines together and does not
allow for differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will
cause driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
NOTE: Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or
streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehicle’s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to
switch the system into recirculation mode during water
fording.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
Flowing Water
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to preIf the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
vent component damage.
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm).
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
The flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and
drifting.
Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a
Standing Water
lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion.
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize will be lost.
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
drive straight up or down.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill, fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help traction to complete the climb.
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
exhaust system for damage.
case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine • Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
required.
vehicle speed and direction.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suscan cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmisvalues specified in the Service Manual.
sion whenever possible.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
After Driving Off-Road
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
propeller shafts.
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
Traction Downhill
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you • After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
your vehicle ready when you need it.
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
3.6L Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electrohydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC
screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be
taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to “Elec- NOTE:
tronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operaYour Instrument Panel” for further information.
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
are displayed on the EVIC screen, it indicates that
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
and during parking maneuvers.
caused an over temperature condition in the power
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
service.
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull 5.7L Engine
over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
The standard power steering system will give you good
turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
further information.
steering capability if power assist is lost.
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it Power Steering Fluid Check
does not in any way damage the steering system.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho- level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
rized dealer.
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Parking Brake
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS) and, if it has
four-wheel drive with the MP 3023 two-speed transfer
case, Hill Descent Control (HDC), Selec Speed Control
(SSC).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
This system enhances directional control and stability of
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corother vehicles.
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En- • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
maintain the desired path.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” loESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro- Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
understeer condition.
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
High Range (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or
Two-Wheel Drive Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD HIGH
range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the
vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to
4WD HIGH range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
The ESC system has two available operating modes in the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
4WD HIGH range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and one Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
operating mode in 4WD LOW range.
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done 4WD Low Range
while the vehicle is in motion.
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range, the from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or Towing With HSA
greater hill.
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., when pulling a trailer.
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Uconnect® Access Settings. Refer to
“Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Ready Alert Braking — If Equipped
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly, (Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake Two-Speed Transfer Case Only)
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support — If Equipped
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Hill Descent Control Switch
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC • Driver door is closed
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
Activating HDC
HDC has three states:
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
paddle shifter. The following summarizes the HDC set
with brake or throttle application).
speeds:
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
vehicle speed).
activate.
Enabling HDC
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch, but the
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• Vehicle speed is below 5mph
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• Parking brake is released
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
the transmission will be in ERS which is a top gear limiter
and the vehicle will shift from 1st through the gear that is
being displayed.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of
the following conditions occur:
NOTE: During HDC the +/- paddle shifter input is used • Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
for HDC target speed selection and will put the transmission into ERS but will not affect the gear chosen by • Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
the transmission unless in Driver Override. During HDC
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
the transmission will shift appropriately for the driverselected set speed and corresponding driving conditions. • Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground,
Driver Override:
or is on an uphill grade.
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
brake application at any time. While in driver override
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Disabling HDC
Feedback to the driver:
HDC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the The instrument cluster has a HDC icon and a HDC
following conditions occur:
switch which has an LED which offers feedback to the
driver about the state HDC is in.
• The driver presses the HDC switch.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
• The parking brake is applied.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• Driver door opens.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
for greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several Select Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to (Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023
excess speed.
Two-Speed Transfer Case Only)
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Select Speed Control Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range • Vehicle speed is below 5mph
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
• Parking brake is released
engine torque and brakes.
• Driver door is closed
SSC has three states:
• Driver is not applying throttle
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
Activating SSC
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once
the following conditions are met:
with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling •
vehicle speed)
•
Enabling SSC
•
SSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch, but the
•
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
Driver releases throttle
Driver releases brake
Transmission is in any selection other than P
Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
be adjusted by using the paddle shifter’s. Additionally,
the SSC set speed is automatically reduced when climbing a grade and the level of set speed reduction depends
on the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes
the SSC set speeds:
• P = No set speed. SSC may be enabled but will not
activate.
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
NOTE: During SSC the +/- paddle shifter input is used
for SSC target speed selection and will put the transmission into ERS but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission unless in Driver Override. During SSC the
transmission will shift appropriately for the driverselected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time. While in driver override
the transmission will be in ERS which is a top gear limiter
and the vehicle will shift from 1st through whichever
gear is displayed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The vehicle is driven faster than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
longer than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (
SSC exits immediately)
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
Feedback to the driver:
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has an LED which offers feedback to the driver
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
about the state SSC is in.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
Disabling SSC
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the followis the normal operating condition for SSC.
ing conditions occur:
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
• The driver presses the SSC switch
seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the
SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
seconds then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
excess speed.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authoWARNING!
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in control- diagnosed and corrected.
ling vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (loconditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
vehicle speed.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acESC OFF Indicator Light
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
NOTE:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Tire Markings
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
5
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
T145/80D18 103M.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
B-Pillar Location For Tire And
Loading Information Placard
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tire Inflation Pressures
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
additional information.
driving conditions. For more information, contact a auDamaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immeseason designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
the tire sidewall.
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
All Season Tires — If Equipped
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
Snow Tires
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
handling of your vehicle.
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proCompact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
checked before using these tire types.
80D18 103M.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Wheel — If Equipped
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipYour vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
replaced.
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, the Security Chain Company
(SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended on P265/60R18 or 265/50R20
tires.
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
different loads and perform different steering, handling, correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
unequal rates.
shown in the following diagram.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
turned off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28
psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage
to the sensors may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
following components:
• Receiver Module
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures a minimum of five seconds, an ⬙Inflate Tire to XXX⬙
message and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
with the low tire(s) displayed in a different color. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
in PSI or kPa.
pressure displayed in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XXX⬙ message.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will return to its original
color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
in PSI or kPa.
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch
cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Once you
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
update automatically.
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
sound, and the EVIC will still display a pressure value in new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
the different color graphic display and an ⬙Inflate to XXX tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
kPa⬙ message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 3.6L Engine — If Equipped
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
This engine is designed to meet all emis• This device may not cause harmful interference.
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us• This device must accept any interference received,
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoincluding interference that may cause undesired opline having an octane rating of 87. The use
eration.
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
ing licenses:
engines.
United States
Canada
MRXC4W4MA4
2546A-C4W4MA4
5.7L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance.
The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to prove air quality.
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasohigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will prorequired. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- fuel system components.
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyendorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World- genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties may be used in your vehicle.
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
• Poor engine performance.
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may • Poor cold start and cold drivability.
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
engine controller memory.
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
exposure to E-85 fuel.
and California reformulated gasoline.
MMT In Gasoline
Materials Added To Fuel
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
E-85 Badge
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternatE-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom15% unleaded gasoline.
mended.
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling.
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
• You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
least 5 miles (8 km).
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formustarting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
during warm up.
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
NOTE:
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
contains additional requirements, developed during exhard starting and rough idle following start up even if
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
the above recommendations are followed, especially
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Starting
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the • Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
pipe seals the system.
nozzle.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the • Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuelopen.
ing.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push down on the inboard edge of the left storage bin,
this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the
fuel door latch to the closed position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
Release Cable
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
be manually returned to the closed position.
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so Tire Size
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
Payload
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the Rim Size
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
listed.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front Inflation Pressure
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the Curb Weight
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in- of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi- capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
cle’s GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
added.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
Loading
the brakes operate.
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
CAUTION!
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information
further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and safely as possible.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
follow the requirements and recommendations in this ready for operation⬙ condition.
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
Common Towing Definitions
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
TRAILER TOWING
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
WARNING!
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
and trailer when weighed in combination.
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear Frontal Area
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or maximum width of the front of a trailer.
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight Distribution hitched are recommended for loads in excess of
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
Engine
3.6L
3.6L
5.7L
5.7L
Model
4x2
4x4
4x2
4x4
Refer to
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. The addition of passengers and cargo may
require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
620 lbs (281 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1 678 kg).
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the
put in or on your vehicle
cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maxi- • The weight of the driver and all passengers
mum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
brake controller is not required.
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,653 lbs (750 kg).
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
CAUTION!
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
This could cause inadequate braking and possible brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
Towing Tips
Paddle Shift Mode
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping • When using the Paddle Shift switches, select the
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
traffic.
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
Automatic Transmission
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a strategy to avoid frequent • To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necesshifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
occur while in DRIVE, you can use the Paddle Shift
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
switches to manually select a lower gear.
conditions allow.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor- Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
provide better engine braking.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to SNOW PLOW
maximize fuel efficiency.
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
Cooling System
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overfront end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectheating, take the following actions:
edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheel OFF the Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Front
Rear
ALL
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
Four-Wheel Drive
Models
See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be
placed in Transport Mode before tying them down (from
the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “QuadraLift™ – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for
more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in
Transport mode (for example, engine will not run),
tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body).
Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes
to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission
into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II® /
Quadra–Drive® II Four-Wheel Drive Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a dolly is used when recreational towing.
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift™ air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information
Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
5
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
9. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL
NOTE:
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEU- • Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be met
TRAL, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
button until the engine turns off. Turning the engine
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
off will automatically place the transmission in
If any of these requirements are not met before pressPARK.
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
11. Press the ENGINE STOP/START button again (withwill flash continuously until all requirements are met
out pressing the brake pedal), if needed, to turn the
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
ignition switch to the OFF position.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
12. Firmly apply the parking brake.
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
tow bar.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
14. Release the parking brake.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
•
If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift™ air 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (losuspension, the engine should be started and left
cated by the selector switch) for one second.
running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the
doors closed) at least once every 24 hours. This process
allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride
height to compensate for temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
5
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, NOTE:
release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEU• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
TRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
will shift to the position indicated by the selector
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
switch.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
OFF.
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
9. Release the brake pedal.
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
11. Start the engine.
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .536 䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .556
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
6
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
6
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
6
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Jack Storage Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
NOTE: The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is Preparations For Jacking
located on top of the spare tire. If your vehicle is out of
fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel
CAUTION!
into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For
more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct
“Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” in this jacking points. Failure to follow this information
could cause damage to the vehicle or underbody
manual.
components.
Spare Tire Stowage
NOTE: To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear
suspension system has a feature which allows the autocargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing
matic leveling to be disabled.
nut.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
6
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift® refer to
“Quadra-Lift® — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on disabling automatic leveling.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the
jacking position. For example, if
changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.”
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
(Continued)
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
6
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jacking Locations
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Jack And Tool Assembly
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
6
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
Front Jacking Location
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
Rear Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut
torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
Stowed Spare
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
tray.
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the
the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m),
road wheel in the cargo area.
reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the
rear load floor cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
lug nuts.
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
6
550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly Preparations For Jump-Start
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenNOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and the hood to assist in jump-starting.
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove
it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
6
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jump-Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING!
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
battery.
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
6
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
you should have the battery and charging system tested and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
at your authorized dealer.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
CAUTION!
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
plugged in long enough without engine operation, will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to wheels or racing the engine.
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place
starting.
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial
Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “ElecFREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
tronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the mode.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
(Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of MANUAL PARK RELEASE
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
6
Manual Park Release Cover
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal
latch in towards the tether strap.
Released Position
Release Latch
4. While the metal latch is the open position, simultaneously pull upwards on the tether strap until it clicks
and releases out of the park position.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission and the armrest.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention- 2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has
ally, firmly apply the parking brake.
been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks
into position.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
6
Stowed Position
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
Release Latch
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the trans- the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to the section
on Quadra-Lift™ for more information. If the vehicle
mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational cannot be lowered to the Park level (for example, engine
will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may
cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper
tie-down tension.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
NONE
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Front
Rear
ALL
2WD Models
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
4WD Models
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Manual
Park Release” in this section for instructions on shifting
the transmission out of PARK for towing.
6
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
Two-Wheel Drive Models
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
ground.
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL see “Manual
Park Release” in this section for more information.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
See “Manual Park Release” in this section for information on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case
may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels
on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed
with all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .568
▫ Maintenance — Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .569
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
7
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . .618
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
▫ Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . .616
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .621
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
— Power Distribution Center
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
7
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
ready for testing.
of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
not proceed to the I/M station.
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
do the following:
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
not crank or start the engine.
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
start this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information for
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself.
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
running.
penalties being assessed against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
Engine Oil
CAUTION!
Checking Oil Level
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check your engine.
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five Change Engine Oil
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informamaintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the tion.
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inthe bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
top of the safe zone on these engines.
months, whichever occurs first.
7
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
This symbol means that the oil has recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
been certified by the American the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
manufacturer only recommends
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
API Certified engine oils.
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
Helix® or equivalent. is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and OperChrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, ating” for further information.
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifiengine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as Synthetic Engine Oils
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operYou may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temmended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended are followed.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
Materials Added To Engine Oil
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
tion.
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use performance may be impaired by supplemental addiSAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper tives.
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
7
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
filter and are recommended.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Engine Air Cleaner Filter
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
maintenance intervals.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
WARNING!
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance — Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
7
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubrimild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulacated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
tions of salt or road film.
MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular from a dry windshield.
7
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the 1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
liftgate glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
blade holder.
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
7
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
7
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StanYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concencoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
Adding Coolant
7
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolUsed ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
with your local authorities to determine the disposal bottle need only be checked once a month.
7
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antimaintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MSexpansion bottle must also be protected against freez12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
ing.
overfill.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MSmally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protechumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaportion of your engine which contains aluminum compoized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
nents.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Points To Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
condenser clean.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
maintenance intervals.
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and
a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these
two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
7
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with
cast iron housings.
7
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
Selection Of Lubricant
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. RecomUse only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain- 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
used.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmisadversely affect seals.
sion damage.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the disassembled for any reason.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
7
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
packaged and sealed.
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
rag.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Seat Belt Maintenance
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
scratch the elements.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
directly on the mirror.
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
cloth.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Glass Surfaces
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
FUSES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
Power Distribution Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Cavity
F03
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Rad Fan
F10
Compressor for Air
Suspension - If
Equipped
Antilock Brakes/
Electronic Stability
Control Pump
Starter Solenoid
F11
Emission sensors
(Diesel engine only)
Diesel Fuel Heater
(Diesel engine only)
F12
F13
F14
F17
F20
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
Description
Body Controller /
Exterior Lighting #2
Trailer Tow Electric
Brake - If Equipped
Body Controller #3 /
Interior Lights
Blower Motor Front
Body Controller #4 /
Power Locks
Headrest Release - If
Equipped
Passenger Door
Module
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F28
F29
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Blue
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Blue
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Engine Control
Module
Body Controller #1
F30
Driver Door Module
F34
Front Wipers
F35
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control
Module/Valves
Trailer Tow Backup
Lights - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking
Lights - If Equipped
F36
F32
F37
F38
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
Description
Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
Drive Train Control
Module
Slip Differential
Control
Sunroof - If
Equipped
Rear Defroster
Rear Blower - If
Equipped
Power Inverter 115V
AC - If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
Cavity
F39
F40
F42
F44
F46
F49
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
10 Amp
Red
Micro
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Power Liftgate - If
Equipped
Daytime Running
Lights
Horn
F50
Diagnostic Port
Tire Pressure Monitor - If Equipped
Integrated Central
Stack / Climate
Control
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
F51
10 Amp
Red
F52
5 Amp
Tan
20 Amp
Yellow
F53
F56
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Air Suspension Control Module - If
Equipped
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition / Steering Column Lock
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left
Turn/Stop Lights If Equipped
Additional Content
(Diesel engine only)
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F57
F59
F60
F62
F63
F64
F66
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Transmission
F67
Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
Transmission Control Module
Air Conditioning
Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas),
Urea Heater (Diesel)
Fuel Injectors /
Powertrain
Sunroof / Passenger
Window Switches /
Rain Sensor
F68
F70
F71
F73
F74
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Green
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
CD / DVD /
Bluetooth Handsfree Module - If
Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Fuel Pump Motor
Audio Amplifier
HID Headlamps
Right
Brake Vacuum
Pump - If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
Cavity
F76
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
F77
10 Amp
Red
F78
10 Amp
Red
F80
10 Amp
Red
F81
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Cavity
Antilock Brakes/
Electronic Stability
Control
Drivetrain Control
Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
Engine Control
Module / Electric
Power Steering - If
Equipped
Universal Garage
Door Opener /
Compass / AntiIntrusion Module
Trailer Tow Right
Turn/Stop Lights
F82
F83
F84
F85
F86
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Steering Column
Control Module/
Cruise Control
Fuel Door
Switch Bank/
Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F87
F88
F90/
F91
F92
F93
F94
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Air Suspension – If
Equipped/ Trailer
Tow / Steering Column Control Module
Instrument Panel
Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear
seats) Selectable
Rear Console Lamp
- If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
F95
Shifter / Transfer
Case Module
F96
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
F97
25 Amp
Natural
F98
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
F99
Description
Rear Camera / Park
Assist
Rear Seat Heater
Switch / Flashlamp
Charger - If
Equipped
Rear Heated Seats &
Heated Steering
Wheel - If Equipped
Front Heated Seats If Equipped
Climate Control /
Driver Assistance
Systems Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
Cavity
F100
F101
F103
F104
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
CAUTION!
Active Damping - If
Equipped
Electrochromatic
Mirror/Smart High
Beams - If Equipped
Cabin Heater (Diesel
engine only)
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/
Center Console)
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. Interior Bulbs
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
Glove Box Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console
Reading Lamps
Rear Cargo Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamp
Underpanel Courtesy
Lamps
Instrument Cluster
(General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
214–2
V26377
906
103
74
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps (Low Beam)
Premium Headlamps (Low/
High Beam)
Headlamps (High Beam)
Premium Park/Turn
Signal Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Premium Daytime
Running Lamp (DRL)
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker
Premium Front Side Marker If Equipped
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Rear Body Side Turn
Signal Lamps
Bulb Number
H11
D3S (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
9005
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
3157K
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
H11
W5W
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
T20
7440NA (WY21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps
Liftgate Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Rear Body Side Stop Lamps
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
CHMSL - Center High
Mounted Stop Lamp
Bulb Number
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
921 (W16W)
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
P27/7W
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be
purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminHigh voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
seconds, as the system charges.
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
an authorized dealer for service.
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp
connector.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
front fog lamp housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
bulb.
the housing.
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Tail Lamp Push Pins
1 — Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Socket
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from 2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
3 — Rear Turn Signal Bulb Socket
lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high mounted stop lamp is LED. Service at
Authorized Dealer.
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
7. Reinstall the socket(s)
Rear License Lamp
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
1. The rear license lamps are LED. Service at Authorized
Dealer
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
25 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
10.4 Quarts
Mile Formula or equivalent)
15.4 Quarts
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
16 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
94 Liters
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
9.9 Liters
14.6 Liters
15.2 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I®)
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II®)
Axle Differential (Front)
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip
Differential (ELSD)
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic LimitedSlip Differential (ELSD)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you only use Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed
ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid
3353.
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier additive.
We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
Component
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir – 3.6L Engine
Power Steering Reservoir – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid
+4 or MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
628 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5
600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16 000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 629 M
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as
needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace
if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using
your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
32,000
20,000
M 630 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
T
E
N
A
Or Years: 2
N
Or
Kilometers:
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine).**
Replace spark plugs (5.7L engine).**
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Change transfer case fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 631 M
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 632 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
N
A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
C
service job, take your vehicle to a competent meE
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .635
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .639
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .636
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .636
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .640
9
634 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 635
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
636 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (877) 426–5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 637
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
638 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 639
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS
9
640 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 641
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
642 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
644 INDEX
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .190
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .576
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .389
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
INDEX 645
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .261 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .29 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
10
646 INDEX
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .569
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .590
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.587
.589
.622
.591
.591
.588
.587
.592
.590
.590
.588
.599
.190
.267
.635
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
INDEX 647
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.504
.407
.261
.279
.129
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . .
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.448
.450
.451
.186
.451
.295
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.554
.536
.549
.556
.569
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.576
.404
.106
.567
.567
.587
10
648 INDEX
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
INDEX 649
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .623
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . .
Additives . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . .
Economy Mode
Ethanol . . . . . .
Gasoline . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . .
Materials Added
Methanol . . . . .
Octane Rating . .
Requirements . .
Tank Capacity . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.499
.508
.502
.500
.407
.500
.499
.293
.502
.500
.499
.499
.622
.504
.508
.605
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
10
650 INDEX
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Hazard Warning Flasher
Headlights . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.536
.616
.616
.603
.167
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener)
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.176
.616
.130
.404
.288
.458
.455
. . . . . . . . . . . .517
. . . . . . . . . . . .244
. . . . . . . . . . . .164
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
INDEX 651
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Jacking Instructions .
Jack Location . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.542
.539
.542
.549
Key-In Reminder . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go .
Keyless Entry System
Keyless Go. . . . . . . .
Key, Programming . .
Key, Replacement . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.16
.35
.26
.14
.19
.18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
10
652 INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .466
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .289
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .289
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
INDEX 653
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .289
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
10
654 INDEX
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .474
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .261
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
INDEX 655
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .530
Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .425
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .590 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .378
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
10
656 INDEX
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .57
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
INDEX 657
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Snow Plow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .378
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .66
10
658 INDEX
Suspension, Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .389
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .473
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.481
.479
.486
.473
.491
.293
.641
.481
.487
.490
.467
.469
.482
.541
.485
.521
.486
.467
.518
INDEX 659
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements .
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . .
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.556
.514
.518
.527
.518
.449
.455
.514
.526
.517
.519
.518
.523
.518
.518
.596
.596
.408
.408
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .29
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .244
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .26
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .26
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
10
660 INDEX
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into
this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity
to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios
and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be
observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made
directly to the battery and fused as close to the
battery as possible. The negative power connection
should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the
negative battery connection. This connection
should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on
the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should
be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases.
Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of
the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical
and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio
to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater
than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.
2014 Grand Cherokee
Chrysler Group LLC
14WK741-126-AD
Fifth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Grand Cherokee
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement